Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

such as duct. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. electrical. Germany. Add basic MEP elements. Add more detailed modelling elements. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. fixtures. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. such as mechanical equipment. and plumbing fixtures. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. 3 . electrical panels. and piping. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials.

Imperial file names have an _i suffix. For example. Metric file names have an _m suffix. and sheets to document the project. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. your Training folder may be in a different location. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. as well as how to open and save them.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. annotations. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Contact your CAD manager for more information. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Create schedules. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. So. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . However. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. views. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. to provide a richer and more finished design. you learn where the training files are located. you can choose to save your work. In this exercise. You do not design entire systems. After completing each exercise. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. When you install the training files as instructed. such as templates and families. and tags. On the Contents tab. NOTE Depending on your installation. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. however. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. When you open a training file. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. For example. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. templates. Create detail views. when you add ductwork. is located and accessed in the training files location. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files.

A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and click Save. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. 8 If you have made changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name.rvt) is selected. you are prompted to save the changes. You may close the file with or without saving changes. verify that Project Files (*. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. double-click Imperial or Metric. 4 Click the training file name.rvt. enter the new file name. and click the Training Files icon. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. For example. if you open settings. click ➤ Save As. For Files of type.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. 3 In the right pane. Accessing Training Files | 5 . and click Open. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. a list of file types displays.rvt and make changes. For File name. scroll down. the Open dialog displays. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. select the folder in which to save the new file. and you can open any supported file type. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.

6 .

every drawing sheet. In this case. the door retains this relationship to the partition. and phases when you need it. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. ■ ■ 7 . drawings. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In the Revit MEP model. the parameter is one of association or connection. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. In this case. sections. quantities. As you work in drawing and schedule views. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. schedules. and plans. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and schedules required for a building project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the hierarchy of elements. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. hence. 2D and 3D view. the floor or roof remains connected. You learn the terminology. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. If you move the partition. drawing sheets. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. scope. If the length of the elevation is changed. the operation of the software is parametric. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project.

Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and 2D detail components. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. tags. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. sinks. boilers.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. levels. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Examples include detail lines. sprinklers. For example. and electrical panels. filled regions. walls and ceilings are hosts. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and reference planes are datum elements. grids. When you change something. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . sprinklers. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. boilers. dimensions. ducts. They help to describe or document the design. sinks. ducts. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. tags. dimensions. and electrical panels. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and keynotes are annotation elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. For example. Datum elements help to define project context. They display in relevant views of the design. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example.

However. If you can draw. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. you must be in a section or elevation view. and ceilings. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. programming is not required. and drawings of the design. and types. families. Most often.Elevation View Element: When creating a project.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. section views. schedules. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. for example. from geometry to construction data. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. To place levels. North . Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. elevation views. you can explicitly control them. In other cases. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. This information includes components used to design the model. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Often. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. In Revit MEP. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. The project file contains all information for the building design. For example. such as roofs. first floor. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. and so forth). views of the project. top of wall. or bottom of foundation. Project: In Revit MEP. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. By using a single project file. floors. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure.

you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. However. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. each in-place family contains only a single type. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. With a few clicks. System families include ducts. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. System families can be transferred between projects. Unlike system and standard component families. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. and similar graphical representation. showing. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. You can also display several project views at one time. pipes. A type can be a specific size of a family. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. or layer the views to see only the one on top. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. For example. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. and wires. For example. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. A type can also be a style. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. identical use. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. hiding. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Then experiment with them. Type: Each family can have several types. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To return the panel to the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file.

tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools used for editing existing elements. data and systems. When working on the Modify tab. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for running analysis on the current design. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. project and system parameters. select the tool first.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and for switching views. then select what you want to modify. tools used for managing and modifying the current view.. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . architect-specific tools.. and settings. and CAD files.

displays frequently used tools. closes the application menu (double-click). This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. For example. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. when adding duct. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. To keep a panel expanded. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. provides access to common tools. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. By default. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. provides requested information.

. click. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Save As) export the current drawing. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Open) save the current drawing..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. select a file to open.. (Export) On the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. select a template and create a new drawing. such as Export and Publish.

saves a current project. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. to.. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.. provides views including Default 3D. family. annotation. To enable or disable a tool item.On the application menu.. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . but is not enabled by default. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. family. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. and Walkthrough. or template file. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. click. annotation. (Publish) print the current drawing. publish the current project.. (Print) access product and license information. or template file. Camera. (Licensing) close the file.

When you are using a command. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. check the Status Bar. This displays the command history in a list. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. To hide the Status Bar. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. displaying the same information. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. or the Family Editor. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. To show the Status Bar again. Modify.To undo or redo a series of operations. In addition. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. when you switch to another editing mode. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Clipboard. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Starting with the most recent command. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. When you are highlighting an element or component. Group. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Clear the Status Bar check mark. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. However. repeat the command. workshared components.

To cancel or exit the current command. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. click (Modify). do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. select one or more elements of the same category. When you place an element in a drawing. Place a Wall. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . On the Quick Access toolbar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. To change existing elements to a different type. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. for example.

For example. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. There are several ways to access zoom options. click Training Files.rvt.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. Zoom the view In the tutorials. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. In the following steps. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. 1 Click ➤ Open. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. After you are familiar with these tasks. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. on the Navigation bar. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. When you release the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. In the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 9 To display SteeringWheels. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click . the view zooms in on the selected area. To modify or add snap increments.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . 6 Click in the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region.

As you move the mouse. ➤ Options. Click and drag to orbit the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. press ESC. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 14 To exit the wheel. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click tin the Options dialog. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. moving the wheel to the desired location.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. For more information about SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.

After you are familiar with these tasks. called drag controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. 2 Enter ZR. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.Design. These are the drag controls.HVAC Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. and open Level 2 . and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. display along the ends.Design ➤ Floor Plans. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . referred to as shape handles. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. and select the duct. bottoms. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Similar controls. Small blue dots.

on the Standard toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. select the first item in the list. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.3 Click and drag the bottom control. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. or press CTRL+Z. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 6 On the Undo menu. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. In this example. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Move. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the Undo command.

and drag it to the left as shown. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. 11 With the duct already selected. 10 Move the cursor to the right. for example. as shown. After selecting the element to move. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . you want to move the duct. In this case. The duct is moved to the new position. and click again to specify the ending position. Some commands. click to specify the starting position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. such as Move and Copy.

Click OK. 13 To end a command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.End a command Some commands. such as the Modify Ducts command.Supply. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command.Return. 14 Enter VG. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Press ESC twice. For example. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Select Mechanical .

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

You can choose from several templates. click Training files. 27 . and modify system settings. link files. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. You can either select a template from the template library. and geometry from the starting template. system families. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. and loadable families. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. settings. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. use copy/monitor. under Create new. such as coordination review and interference checking. In that case. create and manage views. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. 2 In the New Project dialog. 5 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. select Project. the default building levels and standard views. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.rte template. New projects inherit all the families. Finally. such as ducts and pipes. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. and click Open. such as the default project units and settings. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 6 Click OK.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. you learn how to start a project from a template. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. under Template file.

(Browse). 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. When you select the material. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Using the same method.7 In the Project Browser. and open North. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. create another new project using the Construction template.rte template and click Open. ■ ■ Under Create new. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. click Edit. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. for City. select Level 1. click Browse. for Energy Data. If you want to use a template other than the default. click (Browse). Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. Click OK twice. navigate to Imperial Templates. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. under Energy Analysis. For example. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Click Cancel. 8 In the drawing area. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. In the Choose Template dialog. you can select it now. NH. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. review the construction materials listed. ■ For Building Construction. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. For Location. select Manchester. select School or University. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Click OK. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. select Project template. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). TIP This template is the starting point for your new template.

for 3 1/2". After standard settings have been established for an organization.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. click Wiring. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. and 5 1/2". and demand factors for electrical systems. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 24 In the right pane. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. wiring. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Holding CTRL. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 25 In the left pane. 11 1/2". power distribution systems. under Duct Settings. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. For Categories. 5 1/2". select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. under Pipe Settings. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 26 In the right pane. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. Click OK twice. select Identity Data. plumbing. under Duct Settings. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 4 1/2". 22 In the right pane. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 3 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. piping. 33 Click OK. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. Creating an MEP Project | 29 .rfa and click Open. 23 In the left pane. select Views. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Round. and fire protection systems. for 3/4". 4 1/2". and 12 1/2".rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. click Sizes. 27 Click OK. click Rectangular. 10 1/2".

37 Save this file to a location on your local system. select Sub-Discipline. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Click Open. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. click Training. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Linking Projects In this exercise. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. sheets. select Auto . select View Name. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. click Browse. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. In addition. For Then by. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. under Template file. For Sort by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. To enable this coordination. families. 38 Close the file. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Origin to Origin. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. From the Positioning list. and groups that are contained in a project. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 5 Click OK. select Associated Level. For Then by.rvt. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Project. under Create new. select Family and Type. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 2 In the New Project dialog. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. Notice that the file is saved as a template.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click (Browse). 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select it as the library path. Load.11 In the Places dialog. and click Open. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. templates. click My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . TIP You may want to create a new folder first. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 15 Under Library Name. click the My Library icon. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and Import dialogs. click (Add Value). or families. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Save. and change the name to My Library. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. ➤ Open. and click OK twice.

specify the new location here. select Ignore words in uppercase. 22 Select My Library. click the Spelling tab. click OK. 20 Click ➤ Options. click Edit. If you want to relocate this path. 2 In the Options dialog. 21 On the File Locations tab. custom color files. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 9 In the text editor. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 14 Click in the drawing area. 27 Click OK. click Places. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. and decal image files. This path is determined during installation. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 11 In the Options dialog. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. such as bump maps. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. If you work in a large office. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. view the current path. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 5 In the text editor. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 3 Under Settings. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Edit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 19 Click Cancel. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP.

click the Spelling tab. work with snapping turned off. 19 In the Options dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click Browse. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 18 Click ➤ Options. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Edit.17 In the Spelling dialog. under Template file. 22 In the text editor. 24 In the Options dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click Close. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and enter 1 . 4 In the New Project dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can turn snap settings on and off. click OK. you modify snap settings. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the New Project dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. under Dimension Snaps. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 23 In the text editor. 25 Close the file without saving it. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. delete sheetmtl-CU. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.rte.. click OK. you modify snap increments. In this exercise. 20 Under Settings. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . As you zoom in and out within a view. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Restore Defaults. click Training Files. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.

10 On the Options Bar. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and move the cursor to the right. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. TIP To zoom while sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. This is the increment that you added previously. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse.7 Under Object Snaps. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. click OK. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. deselect Chain. While sketching. If it does not. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. For example. snapping reverts to the system default settings. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. If you do not have a wheel button. zoom out until it does so. enter SM.

Notice that snapping is once again active. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 19 Enter SM. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. with or without saving it.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. Do not set the wall end point. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 25 Click OK. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 26 Close the file. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and move the cursor to the right. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. the midpoint. and specify the wall endpoint. and the wall edges. 22 Move the cursor downward. and delete the value 1’ .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .

44 .

you can choose to save your work. In this lesson. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. If the tutorial training files are not present.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. water source heat pump (WSHP). The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. As you create the mechanical system. you first configure the linked architectural model. By following the recommended workflow. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you will understand the process. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. methodology. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. At the end of the tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. In this exercise. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. duct system and a hydronic piping system. After finishing each exercise. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. go to http://www. This system consists of a cooling tower. However. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. and then you create a plenum level. After applying a color scheme to the zones. 45 .autodesk. you first plan the system. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.

In this section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. These components are defined in the architectural training file. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls.rvt. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and after the linked model highlights. NOTE When working with a linked file. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you add a level for plenums. 1 In the Project Browser. Next. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Plan is highlighted. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. ceilings. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. click Training Files. roof. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. under Constraints. select Room Bounding. In the left pane of the Open dialog. not in the MEP training file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. click to select it. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views.6 In the Project Browser. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. For Offset. enter 8'. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Verify that Make Plan View is selected.MEP. and double-click West . click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 16 Press Esc. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. Click Plan View Types. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click OK. 9 On the Draw panel. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Preparing Spaces | 47 . The new level is placed. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and in the Plan View Types dialog.

Under Extents. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Cut plane. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. In the next exercise. However. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. and click Apply Default View Template. For Sub-Discipline. Under Identity Data. you can choose to save your work. right-click Level 2 Plenum. select Level Above (Level 3). Under View Depth. In this exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . select MEP . for Level. NOTE After finishing each exercise.Plenum. In this exercise. 20 In the Project Browser.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for Default View Template. you place spaces in areas of the building model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. select Design. right-click Level 2 Plenum. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for View Scale. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. For View Classification. and for Offset. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. enter an Offset of 1' 0". verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. click Edit. ■ Click OK twice. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 0. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. select Plenum Plan. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. and then place spaces in various types of areas. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for View Range. and click Properties. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. for Top. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans.

walls. For (Tag Location). You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted. enter 0. For Upper Limit. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and ceilings). 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select New. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. For Offset.rvt. select Level 2 Plenum. Placing Spaces | 49 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. indicating that it’s the active view. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. select Horizontal. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i.

double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26).7 Click to place the space. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. for Number. 14 In the drawing area. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 9 Select the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. For Name. Click OK. enter Library. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. enter 219. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ensuring coordination between the files.

18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. and then click Modify. Placing Spaces | 51 . 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. For Upper Limit. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 21 Using the method learned previously. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. select Level 3. For Offset.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

23 Click OK. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. under Energy Analysis. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line.22 In the Instance Properties dialog.

indicating that it’s the active view. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Offset.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. for Upper Limit. click Training Files. select Level 3.rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 5 On the Options Bar. enter 0. and then press Esc.

double-click the space name. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 9 In the floor plan. enter Corridor. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. the plan view would have updated with the changes. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. change the space number to 216A. and press Enter. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. as shown. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 10 Using the same method. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 11 Close the schedule view. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.7 In the Project Browser. In the schedule. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. and scroll to the newly placed space. which was numbered 219Q.

with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.15 Press Esc twice. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 16 Using the method learned previously. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place a space in a chase. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.Space Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. If necessary.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.rvt.

6 Enter VG. 12 Click in the section view. expand Spaces. enter 4'. Under Identity Data. right-click. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click in the chase area to place the space. and then click OK. for Upper Limit. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Interior and Reference. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Element Properties. select Roof Level. for Name. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . select the space. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. select Level 3. enter 0. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. On the Options Bar. For Number. 10 In the plan view. for Upper Limit. enter 225PC. For Limit Offset. For Offset. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter Chase. In the plan view.4 Press Esc.

All spaces in the view are tagged. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 15 Press Esc. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click OK. In the next exercises. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and maximize the view. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Space Plan. 17 Type ZF. ceilings. floors. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Bounding elements (such as walls. select Space Tag With Volume. under Loaded Tags.

indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). under Spaces. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. To display space reference lines. it is automatically added to the Default zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. In this exercise. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. 1 In the Project Browser. click Reference. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Zoning is highlighted. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . After a space is placed in an area. which removes the space from the Default zone. click Training Files.rvt. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

indicating that it’s the active view. you assign spaces to a zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and a new zone is created.Zoning is highlighted. click Reference. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. click Training Files. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that the space is occupiable. under Energy Analysis.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Next. select Computer Lab 222. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. As you do this. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and modify the zone properties. To display space reference lines. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 4 In the drawing area. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and verify the zones in the System Browser. you can add or remove a space from the zone. The Zone tool is active. and click Finish Editing Zone. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. under Spaces. Using the Edit Zone tab. you assign spaces to zones in the building. double-click 121 Cafeteria. Instruction 221. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. and Electrical 220 spaces. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. select Occupiable. The graphic in the System Browser updates. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.5 In the System Browser. and click OK. the Edit Zone tab displays. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i.

select HVAC Zones. To view the zone in the drawing area. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Instruction.In the System Browser. you need to activate the zone visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. 5 With the drawing area active. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. type VG. Click OK. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Expand HVAC Zones. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone).

West . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. under Identity Data. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning is highlighted. In this exercise. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. under Spaces. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You activated zone visibility in the views. expand 2 .Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Reference. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. To display space reference lines. enter 2 . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. for Name. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. and verify the zone in the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.rvt.Area B. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.West . 9 In the System Browser. click Training Files. 11 Close the System Browser.TIP After you finish editing the zone.

5 Click in the Level 1 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view. 9 With the Add Space tool active. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 8 In the Level 1 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning floor plan. Select Attached End. click in the Level 2 .Zoning view. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. zoom out. Verify that the distance is 1/2".Zoning view to activate it. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 15 Press Esc.

East. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . on the ViewCube. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. double-click Level 1 . 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Zoning view. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. In this exercise. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. space. and zone information. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. click Training Files.Zoning to make it the active view. enter Lounge . Front. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the corner where the Top. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. double-click the zone tag. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. for Name Value. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you verify the building.

NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Click (Highlight). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. click (Isolate). 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Next. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. you isolate the space. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. With 109 Lounge selected. and select 109 Lounge. verify that Wireframe is selected. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. Using the Highlight tool.

click . scroll down in the left pane. click . select Lounge/Recreation. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. Below the list of spaces and zones. For Electrical Loads. For Construction Type. and then click OK. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. the space information displays for the selected space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. For People. Next. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. click . 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. and in the People dialog. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .■ On the Details tab. verify that <Building> is selected. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and click OK. and then click OK. ■ ■ ■ Next. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. select 109 Lounge. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. select 1_South_Lounge.

00 °F : 90. verify that <Building> is selected. outdoor air per area. the zone information displays for the selected zone. For Cooling Information. floors. For Heating Information. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. roofs. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information.00 °F : 54. cooling air temperature. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls.00 °F : N/A is specified. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . click (Shading).Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. heating air temperature. and dehumidification set point. and humidification set point. and other room-bounding components. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and air changes per hour. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. verify that 70. 12 Using the methods learned previously. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. verify that 74. This indicates the cooling set point.00 °F : N/A is specified. Next. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. Below the list of spaces and zones. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. This indicates the heating set point.

Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Under Energy Analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. open MEP . Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Under Energy Analysis. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select Level 3. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter 0. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. For Offset. click Cancel. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). enter 212P. for Number. select Plenum. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Click OK. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Name. 15 In the Project Browser. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Plenum. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled.

click in the Value field. under Energy Analysis. you verified building. NH. for City. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. In this exercise. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . space. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. click Edit. click Training Files. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that Manchester. and verify that the space has replaced the void. is selected. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . select School or University. For Location. for Energy Data. On the Place tab. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 03101. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select space Plenum 212P. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.Space Plan. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.rvt. and zone information. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. For Postal Code. double-click Level 2 . Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser.

In order to select a space. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Condition Type. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). Click OK twice. 8 In the drawing area. and click OK. this option adjusts the times automatically. Select Area per person. Under Heat Gain (per Person). For Latent. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. select Library . select Specified. and then click . select Heated and cooled. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Export Complexity. For Ground Plane. ■ On the Weather tab. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. for Building Service. both.Audio Visual.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. verify that Level 1 is selected. click Edit. For Building Construction. and click Element Properties. ft. For Space Type. For Sliver Space Tolerance. If. select space Library 219. for Values. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. a cooling load. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. right-click. or neither. click in the Value column. and enter 50 sq. select Specified. For People. under Volume Computations. verify that <Building> is specified. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. enter 150 Btu/h. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. enter 200 Btu/h. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. verify that New Construction is selected. For Sensible. verify that 1' 0" is specified. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that Occupiable is selected. and click OK. for Values. For Project Phase. you need to select this option. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. and click OK. ■ In the Type Properties dialog.

NH. For Building Construction. select 219 Library. click Calculate. select Actual. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . verify that School or University is selected. and click OK. is specified. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. for Values. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis.■ ■ ■ Click OK. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. For Building Service. 12 Click the Details tab. You should correct the space error in the building model. verify that Manchester. click Information). Next. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. for Values. There should be no warnings displayed. Under Power. select Actual. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). and under Heating Information. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. For Location. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. verify that <Building> is specified. You have verified the building information. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Select the space associated with the warning. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. For Electrical Loads. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. Click OK twice. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . and can be modified here. click Edit.

2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and zone information for the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 15 Review the loads report for project. In this exercise. click to the right of the building to place the legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. and a loads report displays.rvt. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. weather. space.Space Plan. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click OK. select 219 Library. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 3 In the drawing area.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. For Color Scheme. 21 Click OK. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 After you review the loads report. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. space. select HVAC Zones. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 In the loads report. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. or make any changes to the model. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. under Energy Analysis. 19 In the drawing area. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. or zone information.

7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.5 Zoom in to the legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select Tonnage Range. The new scheme displays in the view. under Schemes. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. in 1-ton increments. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK.

Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Using the method learned previously.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. click Training Files.12 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK.Space Fill is the active view. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Select Schedule building components. In the next exercise. For Name. select Spaces. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select Spaces. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . for Select available fields from. enter Space Airflow Schedule. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.rvt. more category options are available. select New Construction. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. For Phase.

select Calculated Supply Airflow.■ Under Available fields. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. and then select Hidden field. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and Blank line. select Number. For Formula. for Formula. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. select Air Flow. click (Browse). select Airflow Delta. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. and then click .(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. and click OK. select Not Between. In the Calculated Value dialog. For Type. enter Airflow Delta. For Then by. In the Fields dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. Header. select Level. enter . Select Ascending. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. For Discipline. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Select Formula. select HVAC. ■ Click Calculated Value. For Fields. and then click Conditional Format. Click OK. In the Schedule Properties dialog.

In this exercise. ■ The schedule displays. verify that Show is highlighted. select red. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Conditions to Use. right-click to access schedule properties. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In later exercises. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. click the color swatch. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. In the Color dialog. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel.■ ■ ■ For Value. In the next lesson. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and click OK. a view opens that contains the selected space. Click OK twice. For Background Color. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it.

78 .

you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After system creation. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. In this lesson. 79 . As you place the air terminals. and work with the airflow schedule. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). After completing the air systems lesson. Then. you will create supply air systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you modify air terminal parameters.

rvt. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. the space crossing lines display. indicating that it’s the active view. and scroll to space 223. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 3 In the ceiling view. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. click Training Files. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

and then press Esc to end the command. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. enter 425 CFM. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and then select both Copy and Multiple. type 12. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. If the host element is modified or moved. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Also. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. for Flow. the hosted elements are updated as well. 9 On the Placement panel.Rectangular Face Round Neck . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 .Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . verify that Constrain is cleared. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. click Place on Face. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. and press Enter. select the diffuser. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . as shown. and press Enter. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and select Supply Diffuser . 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 17 Move the cursor down. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.

If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. clear Leader. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 22 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 24 In the Open dialog. 25 In the drawing area. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. and click Open. 21 On the Options Bar. select one of the diffusers. as shown. Next. click Yes. click Place on Face. 27 Select Return Diffuser . As you place the return diffusers. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. select each of the 5 supply diffusers.rfa. 29 Place 2 diffusers. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. for Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. select one of the return diffusers. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. click Yes. 32 In the Project Browser. 31 In the alert dialog. under Other. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. and click OK. Level. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. select Strong Reference. and click to select the lines.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 44 Zoom in to space 115. click the Level 1 line. Verify that the measured distance is 9'.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. enter 9' 0"2750. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ For the end point. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . and click OK. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. For the start point.

92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. You then create the logical connection between the system components. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Press Esc. After creating the logical connection. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. including energy analysis. right-click the title. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. the space crossing lines display. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. and click View ➤ Systems. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. When you highlight a space. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building.HVAC Plan . However. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.rvt.

Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. System Name. 15 Click Cancel. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 12 In the System Browser. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. and Flow value. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Connect Into. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. the number of elements is updated. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. review the Number of Elements. 11 In the drawing area. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. On the Options Bar. As you add diffusers to systems. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.

25 Click OK. and the system connects them. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). for Mark. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. for System Name. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. which updates the name in the System Browser. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. under Mechanical. the air terminals are the children. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. under Identity Data. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. In this exercise. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. Rename the system Next. In this exercise. 18 Click OK. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.17 Using the method learned previously. 22 Click OK. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you create ductwork to physically connect system components.

In this case. Also. click Training Files. for Solution Type. the Network type provides several solutions. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 In the drawing area. A Generate Layout tab displays. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. and display solution 1. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .rvt. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed.HVAC Plan. 5 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the upper left diffuser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. select Network. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Design is highlighted. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. which provides various layout tools. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.

select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. enter 9' 10 1/2". click Settings. click Modify.7 On the Options Bar. enter 9' 10 1/2". 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. For Duct Type. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Flex Duct Type. Select Branch. as shown. you’ll get an error in a later step. enter 3'. For Offset.Round. For Duct Type. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select Flex Duct Round : Flex . Click OK. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures.

a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. select a different layout solution. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.11 Click Finish Layout. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or manually modify the duct. Either relocate the system components. as is the elbow itself. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or offset elevations are incorrect. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. For example.

Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. fittings. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. select By View. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. and click OK. but not all values are used in this view. a disconnection exists. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. thus it is not part of the system. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and click to select it. and then click OK.Flow. for Values Displayed. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. select Duct Color Fill . and equipment. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. under Graphics. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. The first time you press Tab. for Color Scheme. Using a flow-based color scheme. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Usually. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. If the entire network does not highlight. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. highlight a segment of the main duct.

select Duct Color Fill .Airflow. select one of the diffusers in the system. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select the WSHP. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area.Velocity. for Schemes. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and press Enter. select the color scheme legend. under Mechanical . decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. for Flow. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 20 In the drawing area. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 26 Click OK.

Click OK. highlight a segment of the duct.08 in-wg/100ft. for Branch Sizing. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. and then click to select it. Under Constraints. Select the upper segment of main duct.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. click Cancel. select Friction. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. select Calculated Size Only. The ductwork and fittings are updated. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Select Only. Select Restrict Height. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and drag it to the right. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and select 16". 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and enter .

33 Move the cursor over the system components. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Using this tool. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . and pressure loss. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Use the information that displays (flow. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). static pressure. pressure.

NOTE As you inspect a system.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. also known as the critical path. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. click Training Files. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 35 Click Finish. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.

and click Draw Duct. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct.Design is highlighted. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and select the WSHP.HVAC Plan . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.

double-click MEP . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the corner where the Top. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. select 9' 10 1/2". NOTE When drawing duct. select the top right diffuser. 15 On the ViewCube.8 Press Esc twice to end the command.3D MEP. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 11 On the Options Bar. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. for Offset. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. and click Draw Duct. right-click the connector grip. 14 In the Project Browser. Front.

16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. in space 115. the color fill indicates the flow value. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. The ductwork is automatically created. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 In the drawing area. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Also. 22 Using the same method. it is considered a closed loop.

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. and select the top left diffuser. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 Press Esc. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. You can ignore the warning.

30 Press Esc twice. and then click Modify. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. and click to select it. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.

and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. select a segment of the main duct. and click OK. for Flow. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 40 Using the same method.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. under Constraints. such as a plenum. clear Restrict Height. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical .Airflow. and then click OK.

This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. In this lesson. Create return and supply piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. including 2 base mounted pumps. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Automatically and manually lay out piping. 109 . Then.

Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. click Training Files. on level 3 of the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. you place mechanical equipment.

and select WSHP . in corridor 328. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.Horizontal . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . verify that Wall faces is selected. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 7 On the Options Bar. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Left Return . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .2-6 Tons . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. indicating that it’s the active view.High Efficiency .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Design is highlighted. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.

12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. click the top edge of the WSHP. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 10 Select the WSHP. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. click the dimension. and enter 2'.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to place the dimension. as shown. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc.8 Click the corridor wall face. as shown. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and in the Type Selector.

enter 9'. Under Mechanical. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. select the 2 WSHPs. as shown.14 Click Modify. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click to place it in the mechanical room. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. for Water Flow. Click OK. enter 12 GPM.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.21 Click Modify. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create the logical connection between the system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. including flow and pressure. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. you create the return and supply piping systems.

and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. 5 In the System Browser. analyses cannot be performed. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . but without a corresponding system. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. You can create pipes to connect system components. right-click the Systems column heading.Design is highlighted. Creating a Piping System | 115 . Unlike logical connections (systems). and click View ➤ Piping. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt.Mech 330). click Training Files. where it is easier to review the information. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. while pressing Ctrl. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder.In the System Browser. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 12 In the drawing area. As you assign equipment to systems. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for System Name. This display indicates that the system is selected. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. Therefore. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and the Edit System tool is not active. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. select the 2 WSHPs. Notice that on the Options Bar. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 10 On the Options Bar. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the boiler. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area.

Creating a Piping System | 117 .HVAC Plan . double-click Roof . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.13 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 17 On the Options Bar. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 19 In the Project Browser. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. and select the cooling tower. You have created the hydronic return system. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. under Design ➤ HVAC .Design.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for System Name. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.

right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 25 Select the boiler. and click Select. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Expand All. and bypasses the cooling tower. 23 Close the roof plan view. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. indicating the logical connection. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. In heating mode. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 28 Using the same method. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 29 Right-click CHWS. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. In cooling mode. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). expand the Hydronic Return system category. and click OK.

expand Piping. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. under Mechanical. including the flow rate and size of the component. You also manually modify the layout path as required. and click OK. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Column Settings. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click OK. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser.In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click Properties. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 32 In the System Browser. for Water Flow. you can view several parameters. enter 18 GPM.

8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Mech 330). press Tab to highlight the system. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. you can place the cursor over a system component. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . In the left pane of the Open dialog. the boiler.rvt. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.Design is highlighted. 10 Click OK. and click OK. click Training Files. select CHWR. indicating that it’s the active view. click Check None. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. select Mechanical Equipment.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 9 In the Select a System dialog. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. then the Select a System dialog displays. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system preview displays in red. When you draw a box to select components. 5 In the Filter dialog. and click to select it. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .

13 Click Cancel. enter 1' 6''. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Solutions is selected. duct. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. It does not reference the architecture.11 On the Options Bar. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. select Perimeter. or architectural components. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. click Settings. structural beams. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations.

View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. With each Tab. 17 Optionally. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. to display the path with thinner lines. the flow for one WSHP is 18. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. and the flow for the other is 12.16 Click Finish Layout. and press Tab 3 times. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 19 In the drawing area.

and click OK.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 23 Under Mechanical. and click OK. under Mechanical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Press Esc. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and access its instance properties. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 22 Select the boiler. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.

HVAC Plan . 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Next. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. you physically close the CHWR loop. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click Level 1 . Logically. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.Design. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 27 On the System Tools panel. the Number of Elements is now 8. click Edit System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. which propagates flow throughout the system. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 28 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 32 Click Finish Editing System. On the Options Bar. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and click Cancel. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. select a WSHP. as shown. under Mechanical. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. access its instance properties. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Using the same method. 35 Using the drag control. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM.

select Perimeter 1 of 5. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 1' 6''.40 In the Select a System dialog. 41 Click OK. For Inset. select CHWS. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. For Slope. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 0''/12''. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. and then click OK. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. Click Settings.

you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. as shown. 47 In the drawing area.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. 46 Click Modify. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. In a later exercise. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).

you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.50 Using the same method. or offset elevations are incorrect. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. select a different layout solution. Add piping to close the supply loop. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. To create the piping system. 51 Click Finish Layout. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 52 Close the file with or without saving it.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the return pipes are magenta.HVAC Plan . click Training Files. As you work in the training file. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. as shown. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design is highlighted. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.rvt. double-click 3D HVAC Building.

6 Press Delete. select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view. as shown. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

9 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. ■ Click to move the piping.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Click to specify the reference point. select the boiler. and press Esc to clear the selection.

132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The connections are automatically created. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. select the boiler. and click Draw Pipe. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the return pipe riser. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 13 In the plan view. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and the lower one is secondary. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and click OK. 12 In the 3D view.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . for Offset. and you select 1 connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.7''. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. enter 1' . enter 2'. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. ■ Move the cursor down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.In a plan view. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. and press Enter.

As you place piping runs that are close together. select the primary base mounted pump. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 18 Press Esc twice. and click OK. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 19 In the plan view. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and the appropriate fittings are created. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and select it. as shown. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump.

24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. you select the tee fitting. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 29 If necessary. and click the minus symbol. and click to draw the pipe. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. click to connect to the pump. and click Draw Pipe. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 27 Move the cursor to the right. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 28 Press Esc. right-click the bottom connector.

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. 33 Press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. enter 4'. and click to create the pipe. right-click the discharge connector. select the primary base mounted pump. for Offset.

upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously.

■ Move the cursor down. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the bottom control on the tee.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. type 1'. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. enter 9' 6''.

Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Next.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. right-click. and click Element Properties. you validate the flow through the system. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.

you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. view the properties for the secondary pump. 40 Click Cancel. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. and click OK. for Cooling Water Flow. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the plan view. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. 41 Using the same method. 46 Press Esc.50 or 50% of the Flow. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 44 In the 3D view. the value is 0 GPM. notice that under Mechanical. as shown. The flow is being propagated through the piping. right-click. 43 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. under Mechanical. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . When you create the pumps in parallel. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. Connect the cooling tower Next. 42 Click OK. In the Instance Properties dialog.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet).

52 Close the file with or without saving it. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the cooling tower. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i.rvt. and close the dialog. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). When the valve is open. and is heated by the boiler. click Training Files. Adding Valves In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.50 In the 3D View. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.

Design is highlighted.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. The bypass valve is closed by default.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Adding Valves | 143 .HVAC Plan . 8 Press Esc twice. as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. and select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.

place another Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method. 12 Select Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. parallel to the previously placed valve.

verify that Flow is 0 GPM. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. right-click. In heating mode.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. under Mechanical. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and click Element Properties.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). and select Ball Valve .Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 19 Using the same method.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select the bypass valve. and click OK. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. and select Ball Valve . You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Adding Valves | 145 . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.

you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.22 Using the method you just learned. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. Initially.rvt. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. as shown. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted.

select Pipe Color Fill .4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. and click OK. for Schemes. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Size. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. Sizing Pipe | 147 . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK.Flow. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click Pipe Color Fill .

IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Select And. 13 Press Esc. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Under Constraints. for Branch Sizing. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. select Friction. and click to select the branch. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.25 FT/100ft. and for Velocity. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Click OK. enter 5 FPS. and enter 2.

click Training Files. pressure. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Either relocate the system components. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. 14 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ 3D Views. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Using the System Inspector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or offset elevations are incorrect. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Inspecting the System | 149 .rvt. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.

The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. flow. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. as required. This information helps you modify the system design. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. An inspection flag reports the section number. and pressure information including pressure loss. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.

and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. the Static Pressure is 7.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.67 psi. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. select 90° F. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. for Fluid Temperature. you need to validate them. In this exercise. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and to size pipe.89 psi.88 psi. inspect Section 6 again. and the Pressure Loss is 1. and click OK. 10 Click Finish. targeting those systems that need attention. 9 Using the same method.

notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.HVAC Plan . After you assign components to a system.Design. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . As you learned when placing components. double-click Level 1 . For example. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. click Training Files. and click View. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. thus assigning the components to a system. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 6 In the Project Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. and for pipe sizing.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.HVAC Plan . and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. 9 Right-click CHWS. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. and click Show to view all of the system components.Design. 7 In the System Browser. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Warnings display. and double-click Level 3 . In the System Browser. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). After you have assigned all components to systems. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. right-click the Systems titlebar. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 4 In the System Browser. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the pipe is associated with that system. If you place components without assigning them to a system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings.

You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 13 Right-click CHWR. expand the Unassigned folder. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.TIP If you have multiple views open. right-click Hydronic Return. click Close. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 10 Using the same methods. and click Expand All.HVAC Plan . otherwise. and confirm unassigned system components. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .Design floor plan. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and select Level 3 . 12 In the System Browser. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 .

156 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. click Training Files. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select Wiring Types. distribution systems. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.04. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select 90. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter THHN. As you place components and create circuits. select Copper. Select Correction Factor. speeding up the design phase. ■ ■ For Material. and demand factors that are applied in the design. You also add a wiring type. For Temperature. For Temperature Rating. wiring. enter 1. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. expand Wiring . ■ Click New Correction Factor. click (Open). Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.Wire Sizes. For Material.rvt. ■ ■ For Factor. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Copper. select 75.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

enter -5 fc and 5 fc. select Red. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. for Custom Colors.■ ■ For Value. Click Background Color. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click OK three times. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

as you place lighting fixtures. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. First. Use the System Browser to check your design. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. power circuits. Create a panel schedule. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. 167 . you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Create power loads. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Balance wire sizes and breaker service.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Then. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. Click OK. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. for Basic Colors.rvt. select Orange. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . click (Open). In the Color dialog. By using orange as the color for this range.00 fc.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files.Lighting Color Fill view is open. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. You can create additional color schemes. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. select the color for Less Than 20. select Average Estimated Illumination. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 2 In the drawing area. for the Spaces Category. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. select the color legend. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Under Scheme Definition. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK.00 fc.

however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. The red field will clear once the +/. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. which is the lowest value in the specified range. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.5 fc range. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 .Lighting Ceiling plan.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219.7 In the Project Browser.5 fc range is satisfied. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 13 Click the Level 2 . All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.277.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.

24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the fixtures will move accordingly. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. select Multiple. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 25 On the Options Bar. 18 Click to place the fixture. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 23 Click OK. 20 Select the lighting fixture.

select the 3 fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select Multiple.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 30 On the Options Bar. 28 In the drawing area. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.32 Press ESC.

Click OK. and for Category. click Check None. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .277V. select Lighting Fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 36 In the Filter dialog.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. Note the changes for the space Library 219. select Multiple Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar.277V. click the ceiling grid line as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . The lighting delta is satisfied.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 42 In the drawing area.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.45 Press ESC to end the command. click (Open).rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the light fixture IES files. click Training Files. In the next exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.Lighting Color Fill plan. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 2 Tile the views as shown. scroll to view space space Library 219. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.

select Xenon and click OK. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. Under Electrical. click the value for Initial Intensity. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. click the value for Initial Color. enter . In the Name dialog.ies and click Open. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. enter 162. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . for Apparent Load. Click OK. ■ Under Photometrics. for Color Preset.00 VA. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Type Mark. In the Select File dialog. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.00 lm. Under Photometrics.93. select Luminous Flux. select T5 [HO]. Under Identity Data. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. specify 15000. ■ Click OK twice. for Ballast Loss Factor. for Lamp. select 463T5_S. click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ Click Apply.85. Under Photometrics.277V and click OK. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Under Photometrics. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. enter . and click OK. enter F15.

Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . click Check None. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V. 10 In the Filter dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. and for Category. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.

15 In space Library 219. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . select the top center fixture. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.Press Delete. Note the lighting delta updates again.

Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

19 Close the file with or without saving it. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Junction Boxes. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Placing Switches. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. you add switches. and receptacles to your design. click Training Files. Junction Boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. In the next exercise.Press Delete. Placing Switches. click (Open). and Receptacles | 183 . and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project.rvt. junction boxes. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 7 Click to place the switch.

NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Placing Switches. Select Junction Boxes . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 9 Press ESC to end the command.NoLoad. and Receptacles | 185 . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. The element type Junction Boxes . 12 In the Load Family dialog. Junction Boxes.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.rfa and click Open. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.

16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click Edit Type.14 Press ESC to end the command. Under Electrical. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . zoom to space Library 219.Offset. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. for Mark. note the Number of Poles is 1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Select the junction box. enter JB-1NL. for Level 2 . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 In the drawing area. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. NOTE When entering values. enter 9’0”. Click OK twice.

Select Load. Space Name.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Click OK. and Receptacles | 187 . Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Junction Boxes. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Number of Elements. Space Number. 23 In the System Browser. Expand General. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. NOTE If necessary. 26 In the System Browser. Expand Electrical. Distribution System. right-click and click Column Settings. Select Size. and Voltage. Placing Switches. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. 24 For any column. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219.

30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. 38 Select the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar.

enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . move the cursor along the wall. 42 Move the cursor down. and enter 12’ and press ENTER.

43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. Placing Switches.

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

click (Open).equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Adding wiring to a project is optional. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. zoom to the space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. and work toward the higher voltage. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.

#1 Pole Breakers.Surface: 100A. 15 On the Options Bar.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 7 Press ESC to end the command. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. for Max. 8 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. for Distribution System. enter PP-2B. For Panel Name. select 480/277 Wye. select 120/208 Wye. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the panelboard. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 20.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. enter LP-2B. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. For Panel Name. Click OK. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Max.Loads. enter 20. zoom to space Instruction 221. #1 Pole Breakers. which is the logical connection between the elements. click Check None. and for Category. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. 23 In the Filter dialog. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.

25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

28 Press ESC to end the command. 32 Press ESC. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click (Open).37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Wires. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Hot Conductors. enter 2. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. and for Category. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4.Loads. 41 In the Filter dialog. except without wire. Click OK. click Check None. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221.

Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and verify that Load.rvt. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 2 In the drawing area. 13 In the System Browser. Voltage. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Expand Electrical. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Distribution System. right-click on the Systems heading. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. click Training Files. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Click OK. and then expand circuit 1. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and Voltage Drop are selected. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand Power. Rating.

Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. change the Voltage to 277V. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 22 With the junction box still selected. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Click OK. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 30 Close the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221.

38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. click below the first one to place it. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. under Identity Data. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click Edit Type. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 47 In the drawing area. enter FR4. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 40 Click OK twice. note the label parameters and click Cancel.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Click Yes. for Type Mark. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Click Tags. Click OK. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label.

61 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. For Circuit Number. for File Name.rfa. 56 In the Filter dialog. Deselect Break and for Suffix. and for Category. and click Apply. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. enter a comma. click Check None. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Break. Click OK. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 52 In the Save As dialog. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Click OK. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Next you create a switch system.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click Save. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. under Electrical Lighting. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. click Training Files. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 In the drawing area. Click OK. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. enter a.rvt. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. for Switch ID.

15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. for switch ID. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.Lighting. under Electrical . 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. Click OK. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter b. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.26 Close the file with or without saving it. and for Category. lighting. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Circuits are used for power. 7 In space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). click Training Files. select the PP-2B panel. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and data systems. 4 In the Filter dialog. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. click Check None. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. select Electrical Fixtures. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Click OK.

rfa. and in the drawing area. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 13 Select the wire again. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 19 Click OK.Loads. select Long Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select Wiring. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical .8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. enter 2. for Hot Conductors. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click Element Properties. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. Click OK. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.

as shown. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. and click to select the circuit.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select the PP-2B panel. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 22 In space Electrical 220.

in space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. as shown. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. click the connector of the first receptacle.26 Press Delete. 28 In the drawing area.

2 In the drawing area. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . click Open. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Finally. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to space Electrical 220. select panel LP-2B. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Next you balance the loads for your design. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.rvt. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 3 In the Electrical space.

Notice that the loads on Phase A. 14 Close the warning dialog. and Phase C . Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. for Rating. 6 Click OK. enter 30A. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 12 Select panel PP-2B.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits.3712 VA. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 1-#10. 1-#12. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. and Phase C provides 2028 VA.3616 VA). Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#12. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Scroll down. Click OK. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Phase B 3636 VA. 1-#10. B. Under Electrical-Loads. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .

Loads. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Select PP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 17 Close the warning dialog. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. under Electrical . Click OK. enter 25A. for Rating. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. and click OK. under Electrical . Next you create a panel schedule. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.rvt. and click OK. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.15 Select panel PP-2B. click (Open). 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . click Training Files. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. for Rating. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. enter 30A. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Loads. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window.

9 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. enter 1/8.rvt. under Other.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Font Size. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Click OK twice. click Training Files. Under Header Text. 4 Close the report. Under Body Text. select Berlin Sans FB. 7 Select the schedule. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Under Header Text. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. for Font Size. enter 3/32. for Font. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. select Bold and Italic. for Appearance. 6 In the Project Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. drag PP-2B onto the sheet.Panel Schedules. 5 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. expand Sheets (all). under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. click (Open). 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. and open E601 .

The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Expand Unassigned. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. select space Lounge 212. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. In the System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. In the System Browser. Checking Your Design | 215 . Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. press TAB once. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit.

under Warnings. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. zoom to space Electrical 214. select MDP-1. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 17 In the drawing area. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 15 In the dialog. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 20 On the Options Bar. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. for Panel. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 16 Close the details dialog. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

in addition to loading existing families. right-click PVC . and verify that Level 1 . and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 219 . In this exercise. 4 In the Name dialog. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. type PVC . In this lesson. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and click Properties. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.Plumbing Plan .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. you create a PVC pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a pipe size. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Design is open. planning is critical to a successful design.Sanitary. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.rvt.Vent. click Duplicate.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.

Vent is listed. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . and click Main.DWV: Standard. select Branch. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 26 Click OK. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Tee. select Sanitary. 6 Click OK. for Nominal. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plastic. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . select Tee. select None. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.DWV. enter 1/2''. 13 In the right panel. under Pipe Types.DWV: Standard. 24 For Inside Diameter.0''. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Sch 40 . select Sanitary. and click OK. enter -4' . enter 5/8''. 25 For Outside. select Tee Vent . for Material. Tap. 21 In the right pane. click Modify. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 22 Click New Size. 27 For the new pipe size. 15 For System Type. In the Project Browser. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.PVC . For Offset.Sch 40 . enter 27/32''.PVC . click Pipe Settings. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. Cross.rfa.5 In the Type Properties dialog. PVC . click Training Files. 10 On the Selection panel.Sch 40 . and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . enter 10°. under Mechanical. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 17 In the left pane. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 18 For System Type. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.

add a hot water heater.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . Create the sanitary plumbing system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures. Create the hot water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. vent. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the cold water system. sanitary piping. and hot and cold water piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.

Plumbing Plan . and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. you add 2 toilets. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. click Training Files. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.rvt. including the men’s room (space Male 107). and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 1 urinal. NOTE To identify a space name and number.

5 On the Placement panel.6 gpf.Wall Mounted. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select Public . in the Type Selector. against the left wall. 1 wall-mounted urinal.1. as shown. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.Flush Valve . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . and 3 sinks. under Water Closet . 4 On the Element panel.

above the first in the standard toilet space. and press Esc. use the reference line to center the fixture. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line.) 8 Press Esc. under Urinal .7 Click to place another toilet. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . (Again. zoom in closer. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.Wall Hung.

Rectangular.2'' Drain. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. In placing the fixture. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 12 On the Placement panel. click Place on Face. under Floor Drain . 14 Click Modify.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. select 5''x5'' Strainer . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand Default Sanitary.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and review the components listed under this system.rvt. a urinal. and a floor drain. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and Default Domestic Cold Water. In this exercise. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary.

and click OK. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . Only plumbing fixtures are selected. and verify that Level 1 . draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. clear Lines (<Overhead>). open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 8 In the Filter dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 6 In the plan view.

and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. so the Create Sanitary System is available. You include the bathroom space number in the name. expand Sanitary. enter Sanitary 107. 12 On the Edit System panel. 11 On the Options Bar. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. click Finish Editing System. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for System Name. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 13 In the Systems Browser. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. If you deselected the drain.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary.

A preview of the piping layout displays. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base is placed. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Sanitary 107. a toilet. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. as shown. and click OK. for example. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. select one of the components in the system. 16 In the Select a System dialog.

enter -1' 0''.19 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. for Slope. You accept this suggested solution. and for Offset. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. select Intersections. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and modify it to meet project requirements. 21 On Options Bar. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. enter 1/8'' / 12''. select Main. select Branch. and click OK. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. click Solutions. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. for Offset. 24 In the left pane. select 4''. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. The default settings are automatically modified. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. for Solution Type. and click Settings. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. for Diameter. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. enter -4'-0”. 23 For Offset.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 31 Click Modify. as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.30 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 34 On the Generate Layout panel.33 Using the previous method. click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. adding sinks in the men’s room. and check the slope control. as shown.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. you continue with the work from the last exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Lavatory . 4 On the Element panel. in the Type Selector. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. select 22''x22'' . as shown. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Rectangular. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).rvt.Design is open.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Plumbing Plan . 5 On the Placement panel.Public. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. select Multiple. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. 8 Select the sink. For example. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. enter 2' 4''. TIP When entering dimensions. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. On the Options Bar.7 Click Modify. and press Enter to create a second sink.

13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 15 Click the 3 sinks. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Finish Editing System. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 16 On the Edit System panel. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. Press Esc. and press Enter to create the third sink. 12 In the drawing area. 11 In the System Browser. click Add To System.

double-click 3D Plumbing.Design ➤ 3D Views. with the tee fitting selected. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). use the ViewCube to orient the view. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. under Design ➤ Plumbing . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. as shown. 20 Select the fitting. and click Draw Pipe.In the System Browser. 21 Select the tee. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 19 In the 3D view. 22 In the plan view.

25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. When you press the Spacebar. 26 On the Options Bar. and click to draw the pipe. enter 2' . the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. for Offset. press Spacebar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. In this example. for Slope. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 24 On the Options Bar.6''. 27 Click Modify. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click Apply. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . click to place the fitting.Sch 40 . 30 In the 3D view. 29 In the Type Selector.DWV. 32 Select the double wye fitting.PVC . move the cursor over the stub pipe. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. under Wye 45 Deg Double . 31 Click Modify. and when the vertical center line displays. select Standard.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

zoom in to the double wye fitting. and press Enter. on the Options Bar. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. 34 Press Esc. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. enter 1'.33 With the fitting selected. for Offset. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and press Enter. In the next steps. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 36 In the section view. double-click the section head to open the section view. right-click the right connector. 37 Select the fitting.

which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 42 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. as shown. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. and click to place the pipe. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Modify.

and press Esc. 47 Move the cursor down. press Spacebar. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 46 In the section view. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 49 Using the same method. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. 48 Click Modify. right-click the bottom connector.

You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 53 Using the same method.PVC . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 56 Using the same method. select the P-Trap on the left.DWV. 55 In the 3D view. 51 In the Type Selector. 52 In the plan view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.Sch 40 . under Trap P .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 54 Click Modify. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.

57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. Click in the plan view. select the left P-Trap. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. enter 6''. Click Modify. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 58 Using the same method. Select the double wye pipe on the left. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. and click Draw Pipe. connect the right sink to the double wye. and press Enter. In the plan view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.

Press Esc. and select a proposed solution. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select PVC Sanitary. under Pipe Types. In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel. select the section of pipe you just drew.■ In the 3D view. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. click Finish to select the recommended solution.

for Slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Finish. and verify the slope. adjusting the sanitary stack.rvt. 62 On the Options Bar.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i.

3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Floor level line. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Sch 40 . select the vertical stack. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and click Draw Pipe. and click to draw the pipe. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. 3 In the Section view. click Modify. 7 On the Selection panel. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Plumbing Plan . right-click the top connector.DWV. 10 In the 3D view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .PVC . select Standard.Design.Overall.Design. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select the elbow fitting on the right. as shown. 9 In the Type Selector. 5 Select the tee. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.

click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. for Offset. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. select Standard.DWV.Sch 40 . 17 In the Type Selector.PVC . enter 1'-0”. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.11 Click Modify. 18 In the plan view. 15 Press Esc. as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under Plug . 12 Select the fitting. 13 Click the rotate control once.

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. and verify that Level 1 . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.19 Click Modify.rvt. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. click Training Files. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

) 10 Click OK. 7 In the left pane.Design ➤ 3D Views. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . draw a selection box to select the toilets. For Offset. and click Main. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. select Main. select Domestic Hot Water. urinal. For Offset. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select Pipe Types: Water. enter 9' 3''. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. 6 In the left pane. select Domestic Cold Water. 17 In the Filter dialog. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. select Pipe Types: Water. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and for System Type. expand Unassigned. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. for System Type. double-click 3D Plumbing . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. select Branch. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.Overall. under Design ➤ Plumbing . select Domestic Hot Water. for System Type. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 4 In the right pane. 15 In the plan view. and sinks. select Branch. click Check None. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 9 In the left pane. minimize the Sanitary system. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. if necessary. 14 In the System Browser. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Plumbing Fixtures.

Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. In the System Browser. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. 21 On the Edit System panel. enter DCW 107. click Edit System. For Flow Conversion Method. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Notice that the water main displays in blue. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . click Finish Editing System. 19 On the System Tools panel. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water.

for Offset. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. at the intersection of the water main pipe. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. select Water. click to the left of the urinal. For Slope. 37 On the Options Bar. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. select the sink above the urinal. connect the second toilet. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. for Offset. 32 Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. enter 4'0”. 28 In the Type Selector. and click Draw Pipe. 36 Move the cursor to the left.2 7/8''. enter 7''. 33 Click Modify. as shown. select 3/4''. enter 10'.25 Using the same method. 34 In the plan view. and click the connector. and click to place the pipe. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 35 In the Type Selector. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 30 In the plan view. enter 0”/12”. right-click the top DCW connector. and press Enter. For Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. under Pipe Types. enter 3' .

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click OK. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 41 Select the top sink.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click to connect to the main cold water line. 40 Click Modify. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In.

add a water heater. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the hot water system. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.44 Using the same method. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

6 In the plan view. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.rvt. 2 In the Project Browser. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.Overall. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. select the 3 sinks. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files. while pressing Ctrl.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . expand the Unassigned folder.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 In the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.

You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 Click Modify.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. you edit the system to add equipment. under Water Heater . as shown. In later steps. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. and click Edit System. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Name. and click OK. Default Domestic Hot Water. 15 In the System Browser. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 13 In the plan view.6 Gallon. select 0. in the Unassigned folder.Tankless. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. When designing systems. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 10 In the System Browser. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories).7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. Default Domestic Cold Water. 12 In the Type Selector.

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. right-click the middle left connector. Slope: 0''/12''. 26 Move the cursor to the right. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. select the water heater. 23 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the water heater. and click the water main line. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and press Enter. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . enter 10’. Offset: 4' 6''. 24 Move the cursor up. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. as shown. click Finish Editing System. and select Draw Pipe. and on the Edit System panel. 22 In the Type Selector. for Offset. enter 1' 6''. 25 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Placement Tools panel.

Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. and press Enter. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. select a sink. click Edit System. for Diameter. and on the Placement Tools panel. enter 1''. enter 9' 0''. and in the System Selector. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. select 4'-6''. as shown. 38 Move the cursor to the right. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 35 On the Options Bar. 36 Move the cursor down. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. click Automatically Connect to switch it off.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and for Offset. 33 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. 30 On the System Tools panel. and click Draw Pipe. enter 1' 6''. 37 On the Options Bar.

enter 1’. enter 2' 8''.39 Move the cursor down. for Offset. 42 Click Modify. 41 Move the cursor down. 40 On the Options Bar. as shown. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . and press Enter. and click just above the bottom sink.

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.43 In the 3D view. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 267 . If the tutorial training files are not present. 2 Right-click Standard. In this tutorial. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. and click Duplicate. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You create a new pipe type. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you can choose to save your work.rvt. After finishing each exercise. In this lesson. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. go to http://www. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. However.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.autodesk. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. duct. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For Pipe Type. select Fire Protection Wet. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. and then click OK. In the left pane. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. and click Properties. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. under Mechanical. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. In the next exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. structural beams. or architectural components. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. for Material. For Offset. However. verify that 9' 0" is specified.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). In this exercise. you create project parameters and work with schedules. verify that 9' 0" is selected. For Pipe Type. select Main. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 9 Click OK. click Rename. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 6 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. you modify the type properties of the pipe. and enter Fire Protection Wet. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For Offset. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. select Carbon Steel. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Next.

3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Fire Protection Plan . You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. click Training Files. select Fire Protection. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select the upper half of the building. the space crossing lines display. select Spaces. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . for Sprinkler Zone. 6 In the drawing area. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 8 Using a crossing window.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. click Add. enter Sprinkler Zone. right-click. For Group parameter under.Design is highlighted. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. Under Categories. enter Zone 1. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Click OK twice. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.

16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Zone 1. 10 In the Filter dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. including a calculated value parameter. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. under Fire Protection. you create schedules for sprinkler design.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rvt. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. to which you add various parameters. and then click OK. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. click Training Files. enter Zone 2. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 13 Using the same method. verify that only Spaces are selected. for Sprinkler Zone. and then access instance properties. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection.

8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Units. select Feet and fractional inches. select Fire Protection. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Using the same method. for Name. and on the ribbon. 10 In the Format dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click on each column separator.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule.Fire Protection Plan . enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Click OK. For Rounding. and click Field Format. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. In the Maximum Spacing column. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. click the Formatting tab. 14 Select the new header. click Add Parameter. For Type of Parameter. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Select Schedule keys. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. select Length. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. enter Protection Area Construction Type. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Click OK. For Key name. The schedule displays. select To the nearest 1'. For Name. enter Light. enter Maximum Spacing. 11 Click OK twice.Design is highlighted. select Spaces. enter 15. For Group parameter under. 9 On the Formatting tab. select Maximum Spacing. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 7 Click OK. Obstructed-Combustible. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser.

based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. and press Enter. For Name. Unobstructed Ordinary. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Extra. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Click OK. under Available fields. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. enter 130.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 16 Using the same method.

19 Click the Formatting tab. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. and click OK. Select Header and Blank line. For Then by. select Number. and click View Properties. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Discipline. For Type. select Level. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Area. select Fixed. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Units. for Sort by. enter Minimum Sprinklers. click Edit. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. The Sprinkler Schedule displays.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and click Field Format. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Rounding. Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Sprinkler Zone. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Formula. 22 Click OK twice. under Other. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. click . select Common. In the Fields dialog. select 0 decimal place. for Sorting/Grouping.

select Level. For Fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then select Hidden field. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the schedule. 26 Click OK 3 times. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Then by (second instance). select Sprinkler Zone. select Number. and select Totals only. At the bottom of the dialog. Under Field formatting. verify that Use default settings is selected. 27 In the drawing area.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Level equals Level 2. select Grand totals. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. For Fields. for Filter by. ■ In the Format dialog. select Hidden field. and click View Properties. click Edit. and then click Field Format. 30 Click OK twice. for Filter.

36 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Fields. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. Under Field formatting. For Category. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. under Other. select Calculate totals. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and Count. double-click Type. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. click Edit. for Embedded Schedule. delete the word Maximum. and click View Properties. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. select Count. for Available fields. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. System Name. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Sprinklers. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 .The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Formatting tab. select Embedded Schedule. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. and select Totals only. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Grand totals. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times.

but their values are not determined. and the spacing parameter values are evident. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Protection Area Construction Type. and click OK. 48 In the floor plan. Unobstructed. 52 Click OK. select space 221 Instruction. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select space 221 Instruction. 46 With the space still selected.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. and access the instance properties. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 43 Click Cancel. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. double-click FP . 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. under Identity Data. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 50 Access the instance properties. 44 In the schedule. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. As a result. select Ordinary. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select Light. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. for Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 41 In the plan view. under Identity Data.Fire Protection Plan Design. Unobstructed. under Identity Data. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

you will understand the process. However. By following the recommended workflow. click Training Files. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. At the end of this tutorial.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. 279 .autodesk. If the tutorial training files are not present. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. As you create the system. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. methodology. you can choose to save your work.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you place the sprinklers. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.rvt.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. and double-click Level 2 . go to http://www. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. After finishing each exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.

When there is a small misalignment. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. When this happens. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 3 In the Project Browser. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. After placing the initial sprinkler. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.

and click to place 3 sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.Pendent . and select Sprinkler . 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. as shown. while pressing Ctrl.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 10 Press Esc twice. 9 In space Instruction 202. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 11 In the drawing area. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . select the sprinklers that you placed.

Also.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. as shown. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 13 On the Options Bar. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. verify that Constrain is cleared. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. and then press Esc. Next. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.

for Offset.FP_Ceiling view. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". enter 14' 6". and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 17 In the Project Browser. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. you adjust the offset. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Press Esc. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. For Number. 200B.Fire Protection Plan . under Constraints. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected.Design. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. This number is determined in the schedule. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. and click Element Properties. Next. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. and press Enter.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. enter 11. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and 200C). indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. enter 10' 6". 19 In the floor plan. open Design ➤ FP . 22 In the 200A Corridor space. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. specify a vertical offset. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . Notice that the schedule updates. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 25 Click OK. 18 Type WT. move the cursor to the right. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . you place non-hosted sprinklers.

Fire Protection Plan . However.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.rvt. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 1 In the Project Browser. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. indicating that it’s the active view. After creating the logical connection. In this exercise. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.30 Close the file with or without saving it. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. and with piping (physical connection).Design is highlighted. Unlike logical connections (systems). A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.

In the System Browser. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click View ➤ Systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. as shown. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. within the Piping Systems folder.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. named Fire Protection Wet. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 5 Right-click the header. Creating a Piping System | 285 . all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. and select Piping. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. As you assign sprinklers to systems.

10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name.Wet is selected. and a piping layout preview displays. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. verify that 9' 0" is specified.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. place the cursor over a sprinkler. for System Name. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. select Branch. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. In the left pane. 13 In the System Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. indicating the logical connection. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select an initial piping layout. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. press Tab. system equipment. and number of elements in the system. For Pipe Type. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. For Offset. The Edit Piping System panel displays. 19 Click OK. providing system editing tools. and select the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. Next. enter FP Wet_Zone2. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and on the Options Bar. and click Select. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 15 In the drawing area. click Settings. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 11 With the system still selected. verify that Main is selected. 14 Click Finish Editing System. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system.

21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. and green represents branch lines).20 On the Generate Layout panel. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 23 For Offset. as shown. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. select 2". click Place Base. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). for Diameter. In general. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. When the layout is finished. click Solutions. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. and select solution 5. verify that Network is selected. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. enter -12' 0".

First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. click Modify. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. On the Generate Layout panel. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. A (parallel movement control) displays. 29 Click Finish Layout. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.

and then you create piping to physically connect them. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. the Connect Into tool. and various manual pipe creation tools. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Next. or that offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. Either relocate the system components. 32 If necessary. or manually modify the pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection.

1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 3 If necessary. click Training Files.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Plan . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and select the elbow fitting as shown.

You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 14 Close the System Browser. verify that Solutions is selected. and select solution 5. 12 On the Options Bar. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. verify that Network is selected. 9 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. air terminals. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 5 In the drawing area. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 13 Click Finish Layout. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. click Add To System. radiators. and pipe or duct is created. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection).The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 18 Click Finish Editing System. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 8 In the corridor. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for Solution Type. mechanical equipment. and so on) are logically connected by a system. you can select the pipe or duct. or a system component to display system tools. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 29 Using the same method. 21 In the Piping Plan. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. right-click. and then press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 27 On the Options Bar. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 28 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 23 View the result in the 3D view. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. and then tile the views.20 Open Design ➤ FP . and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 25 Select the sprinkler. select 9'.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. for Offset. 24 In the Piping Plan.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.

32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Because the whole system highlights. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 31 In the plan view.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.

2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.Fire Protection Plan . 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. select 1/4" = 1'-0". for Scale. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ 6 Press Esc. double-click on the section head to open the section view.rvt.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

select 4". 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar.

The pipe diameter is modified. as shown. 26 Using the same method. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and maximize the floor plan. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 25 On the Options Bar. 24 In the drawing area. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). select 1 1/4". 23 Close the 3D view. and then tag the piping as shown. for Diameter.

Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You added tags to pipes. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. For additional practice. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. In this tutorial. In this exercise. you created a wet fire protection system. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial. create details. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

306 .

You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Level 1. If the view included detail graphics. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and view references. and click Properties. and click Rename. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and apply a view template. 307 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. click Training Files. matchlines. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. dependent views. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1.rvt. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. you begin the construction documentation for the building project.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson.

and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. create dependent views for areas B and C. 10 In the drawing area. as shown. 4 Using the same method. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and then press Esc. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 6 In the Project Browser. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. click Training Files. and click OK. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.rvt. 9 Click OK. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. more focused. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. views and put them on the sheet. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and click Rename. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click OK. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller.

21 Using the same method. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . and click OK. and then press Esc. For Line Pattern. 13 Press Esc twice. In the Color dialog. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. For Line Weight. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 19 In the drawing area. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . on the Options Bar. select black. 14 Click Finish Matchline. click the current value. Click OK. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 20 Select the upper view reference and. for Target view. select 11. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference./ ---). 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Double Dash 5/8".

The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 25 Using the same method. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 27 Using the same method. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. as shown. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and zoom to each of the view references.

For Sub-Discipline. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . select Plumbing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Zoom in. enter Plumbing Isometric . 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. and click Apply Default View Template.rvt.Domestic Water. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. The section crop lines no longer display. Click OK. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. and click to select it.29 Close the file with or without saving it. For Default View Template. 6 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. click Training Files. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and select the section box. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 4 In the Project Browser. for View Classification. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click 3D Plumbing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Plumbing Isometric. and click Properties. select Documentation. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. Under Graphics. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. for View Name.

312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select 3. and then click OK. For Pattern. 12 Using the same method.9 Right-click. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click to select it. Click Apply. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". press Tab 3 times. select Dash. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.

13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. and click to select it. 14 Right-click. as shown). Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Right-click. In the drawing area.Domestic Water view with detailing. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. and click to select it.Sanitary Waste. On the View Control Bar. press Tab 3 times. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 18 Using methods learned previously. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.15 Press Esc. click Reveal Hidden Elements. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

In the Format dialog. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. for Rounding.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 21 Click OK twice. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Common is selected. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 25 Press Esc twice. select To the nearest 1/8". For Slope. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. click on the Format value. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Creating Callout Views | 315 . as shown. When the view is associated with a sheet. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. click Training Files. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). select 1/4"=1'-0''. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

under Sheets (all). and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. Creating Callout Views | 317 . ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. using the same method. for Line Weight. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. double-click M601 . drag it to the sheet. 13 In the Project Browser. select 5. Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.

Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and click Apply Default View Template. enter WSHP PART PLAN. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 17 In the Project Browser. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. For Title on Sheet. and select the viewport. For Default View Template. for View Name. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click the callout view. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click Rename. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . under Names. right-click the detail view. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click OK. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and click OK. 26 In the Rename View dialog. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click Apply View Template. 25 In the Project Browser.

■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. 321 . you learn how to: ■ add text notes. linetypes. and annotation to create a legend. symbols. ■ work with model-based components. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. duct tags.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. as shown. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 8 With the text still selected.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

and a segment of rectangular duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Leader is cleared. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a return diffuser. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 15 On the Options Bar. a segment of round duct. as shown. select a supply diffuser. Creating Annotations | 323 . 16 In the drawing area. and then click Right Straight.9 Press Esc twice. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.

22 In the Tags dialog. clear Leader. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. If necessary. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. under Category. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 21 In the Load Family dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. and click Open. you can annotate the element with a second tag type.rfa. 24 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 20 In the Tags dialog. 17 Click Modify. for Ducts. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. click Load.

31 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. and Attached End. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Creating Annotations | 325 . Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A.25 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. as shown. 32 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. 26 On the Options Bar. select Horizontal. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Leader.

326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 34 In the drawing area. for Leader.

39 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. lay out. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. and all elements of that type are affected. 37 In the drawing area. and click OK. not simply an instance property. 40 Using the method learned previously. for Leader Arrowhead. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.36 Press Esc twice. you use temporary dimensions to locate. That’s because you changed a type property. and lock lighting fixtures. select the last tag placed. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. select Dot Open 1/16". Creating Dimensions | 327 .

drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 12 Press Esc. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the dimension line. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i.rvt. click Training Files. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. and then select the interior face of the wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. On the Options Bar.

and press Enter.13 Using the same method. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Because the dimensions are locked. and notes. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 19 Using the same methods. 16 Press Esc. and offset them 8' from the wall. annotation symbols. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. click the 3 interior locks on the line.3 1/2"). Creating a Legend | 329 . Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. enter 8'. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. linework. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures.

Click OK. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 Click in the drawing area. click Training Files. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 10 Using the same method.rvt. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. For Scale. enter Diffuser Legend. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. select Floor Plan.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. click below the title to place the diffuser. select 1/4" = 1' -0". place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . ■ 9 In the drawing area. For View.8 Neck.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click next to the top diffuser. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list.11 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 331 . 14 In the drawing area. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 27 While pressing Ctrl. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. and then press Esc.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 26 Press Esc. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 24 Select the component’s break line. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. The selected detail lines are now thin.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 21 Press Esc.DROP and its text note. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .

32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating a Legend | 333 .MECHANICAL LEGEND. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then click Modify. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.30 Select Spot Elevation . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. enter E. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 34 Using the method learned previously. 35 Change the text on the right to N. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.

39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. click Training Files. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. detail groups. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A drafting view using detail components.rvt. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .Detailing 15 In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 335 . indicating that it’s the active view.113 East elevation view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A detail callout that references another view. and text. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.

and click to place it.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 7 Drag the Power Riser . select each of the 2 panelboards. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. clear Leader.113 East on the sheet. 8 Using the same method. 4 On the Options Bar. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. and then modify and align the views. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. place Power Riser . Next. 5 In the drawing area.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

for Title on Sheet.9 Press Esc. 13 Right-click. giving the appearance of a single view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . select the 113 North view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click Deactivate View. and click Activate View. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. under Identity Data. right-click. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view.

Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. In the next exercise. and click Activate View. you add wiring to the diagram. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. right-click. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. right-click. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. select the 113 East elevation view. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 19 Select the Level 1 line. 21 Using the drag control. as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 22 Press Esc.

and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. As you draw. indicating that it’s the active view. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. expand Lines.113 North view. 9 Beginning at the transformer. as shown. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 2 Close the Project Browser. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.rvt. and then click OK. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. for Line Weight. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. enter Electrical Power. click New. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . Under Modify Subcategories.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. In the Line Styles dialog. for Name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . select 6. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. notice that there are no snaps active.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. In the New Subcategory dialog. verify that Chain is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 11 Using the same method. as shown. enter 1/8". add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).10 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset.

TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 28 Click above the cap. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. as shown. 29 Click Modify. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. select Multiple. 33 On the Options Bar. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.31 While pressing Ctrl. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

42 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. for Offset. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. You enter exact values for each line length.5.36 Press Esc. and then press Esc. enter 0 0. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 39 Move the cursor to the right. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 40 Press Esc. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter 3/32". and press Enter. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.

25. 46 In the Project Browser. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and press Enter. enter 0 0. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. you can ensure that they stay together. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click on the length dimension value. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. expand Groups ➤ Detail. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. Press Esc. and click OK. and then press Esc. while pressing Ctrl. select all 3 lines. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 47 In the drawing area. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. for Name. enter Ground. 50 With the group selected. Using the same method.125.

and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 52 Select the detail group. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 54 Select the group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.51 Using the method learned previously. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. TP-2B.

4 Right-click the ViewCube.rvt. and click Rename. and click OK. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 2 Right-click the copy. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and will place it on sheet E01. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. for Name. click Training Files. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. In later exercises. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right).

click Home. Back. 7 On the ViewCube.6 Select the section box. and then press Esc. and then click the corner where the Top. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and Left sides converge. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. select 3D HVAC Iso. select 3D Views. and click Apply View Template. Click OK. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Under Names. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Walkthroughs. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

as shown. (Right). label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Typical. 19 Complete the text labels.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. and click to specify the second leader point. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 15 Using the same method. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.

and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 23 Click on the crop region. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and then click OK. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 25 Click OK. select Crop Region Visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and under Extents. under Extents. as shown. type VP to open the instance properties for the view.To rotate and reposition a text label.

Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. For Scale. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. right-click the view name. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.rvt. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. select the isometric view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. and click Properties. select 3" = 1'-0". Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Place a detail component. click Training Files.29 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. 3 In the Project Browser.

select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Plumbing. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 In the drawing area. for Sub-Discipline. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 12 On the Element panel. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. select Documentation. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. click the point at the top of the drain. 9 Zoom in to the component. as shown. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. as the rectangle start point. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. For View Classification.

15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. select C. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 20 Select 1. 18 With the filled region still selected. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. Concrete.I. for Type. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 21 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 23 In the drawing area. select the filled region. and then press Esc. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. and click OK. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.P. (Line). 22 Click Modify. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Multiple. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 31 On the Options Bar. 34 Press Esc. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. and then click to select them.28 Click Modify.

41 Type ZF to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. as shown. 45 Using the method learned previously. and then press Esc. (Rectangle). 40 Click Finish Region. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.

select the Flashing Membrane group. 52 In the Create Group dialog. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. and click OK. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. as shown. 49 Click Modify. draw wide detail lines as shown. and then click to select them.D. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . press Tab to highlight the chain. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down..Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. for Name.

60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . as shown. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out.55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method.

select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 72 If necessary. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 70 In the Keynotes dialog.62 Press Esc twice. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. select Leader and Free End. 71 Click Modify. 67 On the Options Bar.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. and then click OK.

74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 81 Select the text note. and click to specify the second leader point. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 76 To select the leader start point. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the text insertion point.

82 Continue annotating the detail. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

and click to place it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 88 In the drawing area. and then press Esc twice. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 90 Press Esc.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. open P103 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. select the view title.

select Auto-Detect. for Line Weight.rvt. Click OK. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. select 3. For Import units. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. click Training Files. select Black and White. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Colors. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. For A-----NPP. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. you import a CAD detail drawing. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. select Visible.dwg. For Layers. Click Open. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

and then press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. open P103 . 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 .8 Type ZF. 12 In the drawing area.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 11 Press Esc. select the viewport title.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful